200
OWNER’S MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ......................................7
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ......................................87
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...........................................241
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................341
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES ......................................................413
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE.......................................................447
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .........................................................505
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE .................................................511
10
INDEX..........................................................................519
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warnings and
Cautions.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also
appears stamped under the right front seat and printed on
the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Vehicle Identification Number
Stamped VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...............9
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ................9
▫ KeyFob..............................10
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ...........11
▫ General Information .....................12
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................12
▫ Replacement Key Fobs ...................13
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming ............14
▫ General Information .....................14
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .14
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................14
▫ To Arm The System .....................14
▫ To Disarm The System ...................15
▫ Tamper Alert ..........................16
▫ Security System Manual Override ............16
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ....................16
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY .................17
▫ To Unlock The Doors ....................17
▫ To Lock The Doors ......................18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ....................18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ...................19
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........19
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ..............19
▫ General Information .....................21
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .21
▫ How To Use Remote Start .................21
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ..........................23
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................23
2
▫ Power Door Locks ......................25
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ............................26
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY .....28
▫ General Information .....................31
䡵 WINDOWS .............................32
▫ Power Windows ........................32
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................34
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE ...............34
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING .................35
▫ Trunk Emergency Release .................35
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........36
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........36
▫ Important Safety Precautions ...............36
▫ Seat Belt Systems .......................37
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)..........47
▫ Child Restraints ........................66
▫ Transporting Pets .......................81
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .....81
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................82
▫ Transporting Passengers ...................82
▫ Exhaust Gas ...........................82
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ...............................83
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................85
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and a
Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the engine START/
STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1—OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
Key Fob
The key fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
key fob and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of
the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in
the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from
the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
(Continued)
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
WARNING! (Continued)
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, a Keyless Push Button Ignition,
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
shut the engine off in two seconds if the engine controller
does not receive the proper authorization codes from the
body control module.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthor-
ized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off
after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15
minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm
itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is cycled to the ⬙OFF⬙
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the LOCK
button on the interior power
door lock switch panel with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK
button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the LOCK
button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK
button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive En-
try” in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙
for further information).
• Place the ignition system out of the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm
will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
Manual Door Lock Switch
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the ⬙Dome
ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (ex-
treme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held key fob. The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons
for all key fob.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK
button on the key fob. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked
with the key fob. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK
button on the key fob to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the TRUNK button on the key fob two times within
five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the
button on the key fob for at least one second and
release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn
signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the
interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the
button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Separating Key Fob Case
A — Emergency Key Release Button
B — Remove The Emergency Key
Separating The Key Fob Case
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Vehicle in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Panic
button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Messages on Your Instrument
Cluster Display
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START
button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be cycled to the RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START
button one time
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Re-
mote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK
button on the key fob to unlock the doors
and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and
release the START/STOP
button (vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) will
display in the instrument cluster until you push the
START/STOP
button.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the rear
doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is
visible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
trunk.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from
the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock Switch
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on each
of the front door trim panels. Use these switches to lock
or unlock the doors and trunk.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
If you push the power door lock
switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob
in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove
the key fob.
Power Door Lock Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 MPH (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the rear
edge of the door.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar flat-bladed
object into the lock and rotate clockwise approximately
one-quarter turn to the lock position or counter clock-
wise to the unlock position (as indicated by the stamped
icons).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull
the toggle lock by the door handle (UNLOCKED position),
roll down the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Lock Child Protection Door Lock Unlock Child Protection Door Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining
on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity
can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will toggle when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” is
programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of
the drivers door handle. To select between “ 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” and “1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks Driver Door,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side — If Equipped
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior
door panel lock knob will toggle when the door is un-
locked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
All Doors” or “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver
Door”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle.
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors if a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
decklid, push the button located on the light bar between
the license plate lamps.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the decklid, the
decklid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of
the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle
and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the decklid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Controls
1 — Window Lockout Switch
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Driver/Passenger Window Controls
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver One Touch Down
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
feature. Push the window
switch to the second detent
and release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
Express Down
Push the
switch to the second detent and release. The
window will go down automatically.
Manual Down
Push and hold the
switch to the first detent and
release when you want the window to stop.
Express Up
Lift the
switch to the second detent and release. The
window will go up automatically.
Manual Up
Lift the
switch to the first detent and release when
you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2. Pull the window
switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window
switch down firmly to the sec-
ond detent to open the window completely and
continue to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout
button (setting it in the
DOWN position). To enable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button again (setting it
in the UP position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
Trunk Release Button
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK button on the key fob twice within
five seconds or by using the external release switch located
on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release
feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock
condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indi-
cating that the trunk is open. The Instrument Cluster
Display will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in this
section for more information on trunk operation with the
Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the
trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even
if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the
trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems.
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints”).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should be
Trunk Emergency Release
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Cus-
tomer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If
You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
Front Seat BeltAlert
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
driver, should always wear their seat belt whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Occupants, including the driver, should always wear
their seat belt whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize the
risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
(Continued)
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Air Bag System Components
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
• Front and Side Air Bags Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Occupant Classification System
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the
air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags
(Continued)
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Passenger Knee
Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro-
priate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined
by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor lo-
cated in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCM communicates this infor-
mation to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passen-
ger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
ployment
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passen-
ger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front pas-
senger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
Not Seated Properly
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo-
nents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS compo-
nents must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim
cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the
vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the
passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat
cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified
vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air
Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
• The Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
Reference the “Air Bag Warning Light” topic in “Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS)” for further information.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supple-
mental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the
roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover
sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretension-
ers, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the
vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits
and interconnecting wiring associated with air
bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is
not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it
becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. For additional information
regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights and Messages” in “Getting to
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper re-
straint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining
Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol : 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
bined weight of the child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether an-
chor instead of the LATCH anchorage system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
Yes You can install child restraints with flexible lower
anchors in the center position. The inner anchor-
ages are 17.7 inches (450 mm) apart. Do not install
child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the
center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use
the seat belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the LATCH an-
chorages in an outboard position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you must
use the seat belt for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for installing child seats in the outboard positions.
Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation in-
structions.
Tether Strap Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for addi-
tional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the seat
belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING! (Continued)
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child re-
straint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further
information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an addi-
tional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................93
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......93
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....93
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................98
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ............99
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped ...................99
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped..................99
▫ Power Mirrors ........................100
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............100
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .100
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED .............................101
▫ Rear Cross Path ........................106
▫ Modes Of Operation.....................107
▫ General Information .....................107
䡵 SEATS................................108
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped................108
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped ..............110
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped ..........112
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ........113
▫ Head Restraints ........................114
▫ Folding Rear Seat ......................116
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED ......117
▫ Programming The Memory Feature ..........118
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory .....................119
▫ Memory Position Recall ..................119
3
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ....................120
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ..........120
䡵 LIGHTS ..............................122
▫ Headlight Switch ......................122
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ........123
▫ Headlights On With Wipers ...............123
▫ Headlight Time Delay ...................123
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped ............................124
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped ......125
▫ Lights-On Reminder ....................125
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ................125
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................126
▫ Turn Signals ..........................126
▫ Lane Change Assist .....................127
▫ High/Low Beam Switch .................127
▫ Flash-To-Pass .........................127
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ...............127
▫ Interior Lights .........................128
▫ Battery Saver Feature ....................130
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......130
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation ...............130
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ................131
▫ Windshield Washer Operation ..............132
▫ Mist ................................133
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .........133
䡵 TIL
T/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN .....134
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . .135
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED ............................136
▫ To Activate ...........................137
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................137
▫ To Deactivate .........................137
▫ To Resume Speed .......................137
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................137
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................138
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................139
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .....141
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .....142
▫ To Activate/Deactivate ...................142
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed ...............143
▫ To Cancel ............................143
▫ ToTurnOff...........................144
▫ To Resume ...........................144
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................145
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......146
▫ Overtake Aid..........................149
▫ ACC Operation At Stop ..................150
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........150
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance .........151
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC.........153
▫ General Information .....................156
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode ...............................157
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ..............159
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation ............................159
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF.................161
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status .....162
▫ FCW Limited Warning...................162
▫ Service FCW Warning....................163
䡵 LANESENSE
— IF EQUIPPED ..............163
▫ LaneSense Operation ....................163
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF .............164
▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...............164
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ................167
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ............................168
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................168
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................168
▫ ParkSense Display ......................169
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........173
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .173
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............174
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........174
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................175
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................176
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................177
▫ ParkSense Display ......................177
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........186
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .....186
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............187
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........187
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ............................189
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System..........................189
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................191
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................199
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ............................208
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ...................210
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ................211
▫ Sunglass Bin Door ......................212
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .
. . .213
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink.....214
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ..............215
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ..........216
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......217
▫ Using HomeLink .......................218
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Security..............................219
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................219
▫ General Information .....................219
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........220
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ...............221
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........221
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ................221
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ...........221
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................222
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ................222
▫ Sunshade Operation .....................222
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................222
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................222
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................222
▫ Relearn Procedure ......................223
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED ............................223
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ...............224
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........225
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ................225
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ...........225
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ................225
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express ...........225
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode.......225
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express ............226
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode .......226
▫ Pinch
Protect Feature ....................226
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................226
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................227
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................227
䡵 POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED ..........227
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED .........229
䡵 CUPHOLDERS .........................230
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ...................230
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ...................230
䡵 STORAGE .............................231
▫ Glove Compartment .....................231
▫ Console Features .......................232
▫ Door Storage ..........................235
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped .....235
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES .................236
▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
Equipped ............................236
▫ Cargo Net Hooks .......................238
▫ Ski Pass-Through .......................239
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ...............240
▫ Rear Window Defroster ..................240
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view
viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned On
or Off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature
On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
9-1-1 button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile fea-
tures.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to
a 9-1-1 operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle im-
mediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is re-
quired for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the rearview
mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Po-
sitioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X(voice/
data) or 3G(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer-
gency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
(Continued)
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and
puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators, which
flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front
and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the key fob or open
any door. This LED shines downward to illuminate the
ground adjacent to the Front and Rear Doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition
is placed into the RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will then
return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will
have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Win-
dow Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Power Mirror Control
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning
the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Rear Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE: The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection
zones.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
BSM Warning Light
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system. It
is intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Stan-
dards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
2. The device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s seat.
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up,
down, forward or rearward.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver’s seat may be
equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
Power Seat Recliner Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to
raise or lower the lumbar support.
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar
is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
(Continued)
Power Lumbar Switch
Front Seat Adjustment
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 min-
utes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Seat Height Adjustment
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn
the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward mini-
mizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head
and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal posi-
tion following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to
their normal position see your authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the
head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions Up,
Mid and Down. The center head restraint has only two
positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is being
occupied the head restraint should be in the raised posi-
tion. When there is no occupant in the center seat, the head
restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can be
folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either or
both seatbacks.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Rear Seat Release Loops
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children. They
could be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio
station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1) memory
button and the number (2) memory button. The memory
switch allows the driver to recall either of the two pre-
programmed memory profiles by pushing the appropriate
number button on the switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing
profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory switch,
then push the number (1) button within five seconds.
The Instrument Cluster Display will display which
memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory switch,
then push the number (2) button within five seconds.
The Instrument Cluster Display will display which
memory position is being set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Driver Memory Switch
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles with a push of the
UNLOCK button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Memory To FOB” feature through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory switch,
then within five seconds push and release the button
labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the Instrument Cluster Display.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the SET (S) button, followed by push-
ing the UNLOCK button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on the
key fob linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on the
key fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehi-
cle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two levers must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver’s door.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and push
and hold the safety latch lever to the right.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the op-
eration of the headlights, parking lights, automatic
headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights, instru-
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights —
if equipped.
Safety Latch Lever
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity
Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensi-
tivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam
lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition
ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition
off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight posi-
tion.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the en-
gine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK
position. The lights will remain on until the ignition is
switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake
is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Fog Light Switch
Multifunction Lever
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display and a continuous chime will
sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Push the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the button a second time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-
dently by pushing the lenses.
Push the lens once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The
lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the
key fob is pushed.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
ment light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
(Lights OFF), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the head-
light switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under
I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom OFF position. The interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, Instrument Cluster Display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved
to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If snow packing occurs that obstructs the normal
operation of the windshield wipers the following message
will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display: ⬙Front
Wipers Blocked Cycle Switch or Clean the Windshield⬙.It
is important to remove the snow accumulation to allow the
wipers to function normally and to maintain good visibil-
ity of the road.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn
off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Intermittent Wiper Operation Windshield Washer Operation
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occa-
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever up-
ward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto-
matically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensi-
tive. Setting three should be used for normal rain condi-
tions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires
less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
Mist Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position. This is to disable
the wiper system while going through an automatic car
wash.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle up until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
130 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when
the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic
Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same
time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System
can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set
speed.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET-/Decel
2 — SET+/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Instrument
Cluster Display will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned
off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelera-
tor and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without eras-
ing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease
speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Electronic
Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer
to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
propriate distance between vehicles.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for
cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will
not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the
mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al-
ways confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within 3
minutes the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
(Continued)
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
5 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — SET+/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET-/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the
Instrument Cluster Display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the Instrument Cluster Display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the Instrument Cluster
Display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the Instrument Cluster Display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
+ button or the SET - button and release. The Instrument
Cluster Display will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
NOTE: If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than 3
minutes, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC
system will be cancelled.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The Instrument Cluster Display will display the last
set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reen-
gage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET -
buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
the vehicle.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for two
seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does
not start moving within two seconds, the ACC system
will display a message that the system will release the
brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the brakes are released.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the Instrument Cluster Display.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the Instrument Cluster Display will show the “Sensed
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system will adjust the
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance set-
ting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the Instrument Cluster Display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the Instrument Cluster
Display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
Brake Alert
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
Set Speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The Instrument Cluster Display will show the current ACC
system settings. The Instrument Cluster Display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the
following displays in the Instrument Cluster Display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the Instrument
Cluster Display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The Instrument Cluster Display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the Instrument Cluster Display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your Authorized Dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
Authorized Dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermar-
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the Instrument Cluster Display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the Instrument Cluster Display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your Authorized Dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turn Or Bend Example
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Stan-
dards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be oper-
ated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing
to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
mode.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se-
lected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/
KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light
will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the D (DRIVE)
position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with miti-
gation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the Instrument Cluster Display), and
may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects
a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
braking are intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warn-
ing with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
FCW Message
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns
off).
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near warns
the driver later.
Forward Collision Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away and it applies limited
braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the Instrument Cluster Display reads “ACC/FCW Lim-
ited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your Authorized Dealer.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the Instrument Cluster Display
reads:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an Authorized Dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the Instrument Cluster Display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the Instrument Cluster Display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the Instrument Cluster Display.
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Instrument Cluster Display.
LaneSense Warning Button
Lane Sense On Message
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7.0 Instrument Cluster Display Screen — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking
has been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the Instrument Cluster Display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the Instrument Cluster Display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured through
the Uconnect system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
alization settings.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
ward collision warning, etc.)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
ing speed, a warning will appear within the Instrument
Cluster Display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Pro-
grammable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Instru-
ment Cluster Display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
for further information.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn ON indicating the
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the Instrument Cluster Display
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be ON.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the Instru-
ment Cluster Display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the Instrument Cluster Display will display the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the Instrument Cluster Display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
ParkSense Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the Instrument Cluster Display, see an autho-
rized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the Instrument Cluster
Display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the Instrument
Cluster Display will show a “PARKSENSE OFF” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the sys-
tem detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
matic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in the
rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active Park
Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Pro-
grammable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Instru-
ment Cluster Display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn ON indicating the
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast
sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
No Tone/Solid Arc
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings
will not be accessible from the Instrument Cluster Display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the Instrument Cluster Display
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be ON.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the Instrument Cluster Dis-
play will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the Instrument Cluster
Display will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be
displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear
sensor location depending on where the fault is detected.
The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side
that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt
ParkSense Switch
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within the five
second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the Instrument Cluster Display make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the Instrument Cluster Dis-
play, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, provid-
ing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steer-
ing wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. De-
pending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneu-
vering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately.
This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration
to improve the performance of the feature. The system
will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences such as over or
under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space.
• pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
• The Driver’s door is opened.
• The trunk is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the Instrument Cluster Display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following condi-
tions are present:
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The gear position is in DRIVE.
• The ignition is in the RUN position.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
• The Driver’s door is closed.
• The trunk is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the Instrument Cluster Display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpen-
dicular Park” message will appear in the Instrument
Cluster Display. You may switch to perpendicular parking
if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Active ParkSense Searching
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
•
It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system will cancel and the Instrument Cluster Display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — STOP
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the
maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satis-
fied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Perpen-
dicular Park” message will show in the Instrument Cluster
Display. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting to a perpen-
dicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking
if you desire.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for
Parallel Park” message will appear in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching Display
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
•
It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the Instrument Cluster Display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving for-
ward. You are responsible for safety and must continue
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of RE-
VERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched
to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
VERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out
of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button
personalization entry in the camera settings menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
ParkView Camera Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Power sunroof and power
sunshade switches may also be included, if equipped.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Push the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the button a second time.
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof/Sunshade Overhead Console — Power Sunroof
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-
dently by pushing the lenses.
Push the lens once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The
lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the
key fob is pushed.
Sunglass Bin Door
The overhead console has a compartment which provides
storage for a pair of sunglasses.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear mounted or front
mounted sunglass bin door.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design.
Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to open.
Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld
transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security sys-
tems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sun visor
designate the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
Sunglass Bin Door — Rear Mounted
Sunglass Bin Door — Front Mounted
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
federal safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
HomeLink Indicator And Buttons
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufac-
turer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all chan-
nels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
(Continued)
Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
Sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at full
open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
Sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at full
closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any other
actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a single-pane sunroof, there is
a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof
when the “Express Operation” feature stops working. To
reset the sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit the
hard stop and move to the Vent position after 10
seconds.
4. Release the Close switch, then push and hold the Close
switch again within 5 seconds to begin the teaching
process. The sunroof will complete one full cycle and
return to the Fully Closed position.
NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated starting
from the first step.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
reset and ready to use.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switches are located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the sunroof switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to the
full open position and automatically stop. (If the sunshade
is in the closed position when the operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open position
prior to the sunroof opening). This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Power Shade Switches
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will (if the sunshade is in the closed position
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automati-
cally open to the half open position prior to the sunroof
opening) open to the full open position and automatically
stop. Any release of the switch will stop the movement.
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
Sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at full
closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The
shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open
position. Push and hold the shade switch rearward again
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
and the shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade com-
pletely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a
Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE: All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle
is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area on
the center stack of the instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
(Continued)
Front Center Console Outlet
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
forward wall of the center console storage bin, below the
media center. This outlet can power cellular phones, elec-
tronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The
outlet automatically turns off when the device is un-
plugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
Power Inverter Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the center console forward of
the armrest between the front seats.
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
Front Seat Cupholders
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to open the
glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with a
lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the emer-
gency key from the key fob, insert emergency key into
glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn the key
to the lock position and remove the key. Use the reverse
sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Glove Compartment Release Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Console Features
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest.
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
The armrest can be slid forward/rearward to allow driver/
passenger comfort position.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
There is a front center console storage area located under
the center console cupholder.
• To access the front center console storage area push the
release button and pull rearward.
NOTE: The center console cupholder can be placed in any
position to maintain access to the storage area.
Center Console Armrest Storage
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Located inside the center console storage compartment is a
line that indicates how much storage is allowed.
Center Console Cupholder Release Front Center Console Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
NOTE: Filling the console storage area above this line may
impede the sliding of the cupholder.
Located inside the front of the console storage area power
cords can be routed from the storage area to the center
console pass-through.
Storage Compartment Fill Line Center Console Storage Passage
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas with a bottle holder.
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Front Center Console Pass-Through Front Door Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
Equipped
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-
ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Rear Armrest Storage Rear Seatback Loops
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
(Continued)
Folded Rear Seatback
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING! (Continued)
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Cargo Net Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with cargo net hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 35 lbs (16 kg)
of the cargo net hook. Damage may occur to hook and
mounting surface.
Cargo Net Hooks
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis, to
be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and pull
downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through door.
Ski Pass-Through
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control. Push this button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. For
an additional 5 minutes of operation, push the button a
second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...........243
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................244
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ........247
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ...............247
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights .............256
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights..............265
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights..............268
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ...............270
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........271
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location
and Controls ..........................271
▫ Oil Change Reset ......................273
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages ........274
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .......276
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................282
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................284
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate .................285
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen ...............285
▫ Customer Programmable Features/
Personal Settings —
Uconnect 5.0/8.4/8.4 NAV Settings ..........285
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........303
䡵 USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED. . . .303
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ............................304
▫ Radio Operation........................304
▫ Media Mode ..........................304
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .305
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........305
4
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ....................306
▫ Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
Overview ............................306
▫ Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Overview ............................310
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ............................318
▫ Operating Tips ........................319
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ...............322
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ...........................322
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................322
▫ Get Started ...........................323
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................324
▫ Radio ...............................325
▫ Media ...............................326
▫ Phone ...............................327
▫ Voice Text Reply .......................328
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) ...................329
▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) ................330
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) .............331
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) ...................332
▫ Vehicle Health Alert ....................332
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) ................332
▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) ...............334
▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)......................335
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)..........335
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............336
▫ Do Not Disturb ........................339
▫ General
Information .....................340
▫ Additional Information ...................340
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio Screen 11 — Steering Wheel
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 7 — Passenger Air Bag 12 — Hood Release
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Compartment 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Cruise Controls 9 — Radio Controls
5 — Ignition Switch 10 — Climate Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster — Base
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster — Premium
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Instrument Cluster Display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications
are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system mal-
function or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a
continuous chime will sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to cool whichever comes
first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your En-
gine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with se-
vere usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission
into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase the engine
speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair im-
mediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly and that
service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on un-
til fuel is added.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the ben-
efits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service
is required.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning prop-
erly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light
This light will turn on when ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the sys-
tem is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the Instrument Cluster and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn
signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the
multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed Con-
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control ” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged and the target vehicle is de-
tected. Refer to ⬙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle⬙ for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Ready
Display Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is ready, but not set. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an interactive cluster dis-
play, located in the instrument cluster, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/
OFF position, the opening/closing of a door will activate
the display for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
The Instrument Cluster Display features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the center of the
instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display — Base
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
The Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu items may
consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Settings
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
Instrument Cluster Display — Premium
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to a main menu item from an information
or submenu screen.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will display
in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
The Oil Life can also be reset through the instrument
cluster display.
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life Screen
In The Display And Holding OK
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to access
the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset the Oil Life.
5. Push and release the UP
arrow button to exit the
screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in Ignition
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Service Transmission
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The Instrument Cluster Display menu items dis-
play in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items
may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu displays in the Instrument
Cluster Display. Push and release the OK button to
toggle between km/h and MPH speedometer display.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu displays in the Instrument
Cluster Display. Push and release the OK button . Push
the LEFT
or RIGHT arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus.
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To XX”
is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value
of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other
tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” under
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu displays in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The Instrument Cluster Display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the informa-
tion display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the information
display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• The Instrument Cluster Display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
LaneSense Menu — If Equipped
The Instrument Cluster Display displays the current La-
neSense system settings. The information displayed de-
pends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that
need to be met. For further information, refer to “La-
neSense — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
• There are two sub menu pages, one with Current value
displayed and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display (Toggle LEFT
or RIGHT ar-
row button to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip infor-
mation will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Messages Menu appears in the Instrument
Cluster Display. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT
ar-
row button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the Instrument
Cluster Display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
Instrument Cluster Display as well as the location
where that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default — Base)
• Outside Temp (default — Premium)
• Time
• Range
• Average Economy (L/100km or MPG)
• Current Economy (L/100km or MPG)
Upper Right
• None
• Compass (default — Premium)
• Outside Temp (default — Base)
• Time
• Range
• Average Economy (L/100km or MPG)
• Current Economy (L/100km or MPG)
NOTE: Defaults will change to Average Economy Upper
Right, Range Upper Left if the proxies for Compass and
Outside Temp are not available
Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
• Time
• Range
• Average Economy
• Current Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio Information
• Menu Title (Default)
• Digital Speedometer
Defaults
• Restore
• Cancel
Odometer
• On (Default)
• Off
Fuel Gauge — Premium
• Standard (Default)
• Range
Vehicle Settings — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Settings Menu displays in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display. Push OK button to enter the
setting, select from list of settings below, and push the
OK button to save the setting.
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
1 Language
Select
Language English, Spanish,
French
2 Units Select Units U.S., Metric
3 FCW
Warning
FCW
Sensitivity
Near, Far
4 FCW
Braking
FCW Braking On, Off
5 Parksense Parksense Off, Sound Only,
Sound & Display
6 Front
Parksense
Volume
Front
Parksense Vol
Low, Med, High
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
7 Rear
Parksense
Volume
Rear
Parksense Vol
Low, Med, High
8 Rear
Parksense
Braking
Parksense
Braking
On/Off
9 Blind Spot
Alert
Blind Spot
Alert
Off, Lights Only,
Lights & Chime
10 Lanesense
Warning
Lanesense
Alert
Early, Med, Late
11 Lanesense
Strength
Lanesense
Force
Low, Med, High
12 Hill Start
Assist
Hill Start Asst On, Off
13 Auto Lock
Doors
Auto Lock
Doors
On, Off
14 Auto Unlock
Doors
Auto Unlock
Doors
On, Off
15 Passive
Entry
Passive Entry On, Off
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
16 Remote
Unlock
Sequence
Remote
Unlock
Driver Door, All
Doors
17 Key Fob
Linked To
Memory
Key In
Memory
On, Off
18 Remote Start
Comfort
System
Rmt Start
Comfort
Off, Remote
Starts Only, All
Starts
19 Sound Horn
With
Remote Start
Horn W/Rmt
Start
On, Off
20 Sound Horn
With
Remote
Lock
Horn W/Rmt
Lock
Off, 1st Press,
2nd Press
21 Flash Lights
With Lock
Lights
W/Lock
On, Off
22 Daytime
Running
Lights
Daytime
Lights
On, Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
23 Automatic
Highbeams
Auto
Highbeams
On, Off
24 Headlights
On With
Wipers
Lights
W/Wipers
On, Off
25 Rain Sensing
Wipers
Auto Wipers On, Off
26 Headlights
Off Delay
Lights Off
Delay
0 Seconds,
30 Seconds,
60 Seconds,
90 Seconds
27 Key-Off
Power Delay
Power Off
Delay
Off, 45 Seconds,
5 Minutes,
10 Minutes
28 Illuminated
Approach
Lights
W/Unlock
0 Seconds,
30 Seconds,
60 Seconds,
90 Seconds
29 Easy Exit
Seat
Easy Exit Seat On, Off
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
30 Tilt Mirror
In Reverse
Tilt Mirror
In R
On, Off
31 Compass
Variance
Compass Var See Owner’S
Manual, X
Increment
32 Calibrate
Compass
Compass Cal Push > To
Calibrate The
Compass
33 Brake
Service
Brake Service Brake Service
Unavailable
Accelerator Pedal
Pressed
34 Auto Park
Brake
Auto Park
Brake
On, Off
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
•
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest Authorized
Dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All About
Uconnect Access” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons are located below the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings (i.e. 30, 60, 90) push the center of the control knob
one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e. ON,
OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and Back
buttons located below the system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect screen.
Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn the screen
on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0/8.4/8.4 NAV Settings
Uconnect 5.0 — If a SETTINGS button on the faceplate
exists, push this button. If not, push the MORE button on
the faceplate and press the ⬙Settings⬙ button on the touch-
screen. The remaining settings are defined for the Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV — Press the “Apps” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect 8.4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable fea-
tures that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock,
Safety & Driving Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Op-
tions, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore
Settings, Clear Personal Data (if equipped).
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button
on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the
“X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Lan-
guage” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Units US Metric
Touchscreen Beep
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE: When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in
the Instrument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Voice Brief Detailed
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Fixed Guidelines — If
Equipped
NOTE: When the “ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines” feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are over-
laid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warn-
ing On/Off — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warn-
ing Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Far Med Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly
in front of you, based on the option selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near”
will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Off Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Dis-
play.”
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume
Low Medium High
Front ParkSense Chime
Volume
Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located be-
hind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Setting Name Selectable Options
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wip-
ers
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE: The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through
steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Electric Park Brake Ser-
vice Mode — If Equipped
NOTE: The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize
a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear founda-
tion brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake
NOTE:
Auto Park Brake will set the park brake once the vehicle is set in park (or at key off for a manual transmission).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illumi-
nated On Approach
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Dim High
Beams— If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automati-
cally under certain conditions.
Daytime Running
Lights — If
Equipped
Yes No
Flash Lights With
Lock
On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of
the key fob UNLOCK button. You must press the key fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When
⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob UNLOCK
button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Pas-
sive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driv-
er’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door”
is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is se-
lected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Setting Name Selectable Options
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driv-
er’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when enter-
ing and exiting the vehicle.
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn
ON.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power
Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the igni-
tion is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature slightly increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the
Speed Adjusted Volume press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen and select from “Off,” “1,”
“2” or “3” buttons on the touchscreen.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input
Loudness — If Equipped
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
This feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE: When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, dis-
playing the system software version.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area of the center console, this
feature allows an external device, to be connected to the
audio system.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Media Hub
1 — USB Port (Media and Charge)
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media Hub
1 — USB Port (Media and Charge)
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port (Media and Charge)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various audio modes available (AM/FM/
SXM/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which audio mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
while in mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the selected media (Disc, AUX, Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev-
ertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen Overview
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen Description
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 10 minutes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Icon Description
Blower Control Knob
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using the blower control knob on
the faceplate. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Temperature Control Knob
Temperature Control is used to regulate the temperature of the air forced through the climate
system. The temperature can be selected using the temperature control knob on the faceplate.
The temperature increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature
decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Faceplate Mode
Control Knob
Panel Mode
Mode Control Knob
Mode Control is used to regulate the direction of the air forced through the climate system. The
mode can be selected using the mode control knob on the faceplate. The mode can be changed
between the following settings by rotating the knob clockwise or counterclockwise:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Front Defrost
Mode
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Front Defrost Mode
Set the Mode Control Knob to the Front Defrost Setting, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Overview
Manual Climate Controls With A Uconnect 5.0 Touchscreen
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Climate Controls With A Uconnect 5.0 Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Automatic Climate Controls With A Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Touchscreen
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Description
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Icon Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode
is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 10 minutes.
Passenger Temperature Buttons — If Equipped
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the UP button on the face-
plate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature
bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the
DOWN button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-
ture settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up with
the driver’s temperature, when it is increased.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator
is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger tempera-
ture setting with the driver temperature setting. The Sync feature also synchronizes the rear pas-
sengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature set-
ting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Manual Face-
plate Knob
Automatic Face-
plate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the face-
plate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the blower icon with the arrow pointing down to reduce the blower
setting and the blower icon with the arrow pointing up to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Modes Control
Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Driver Temperature Buttons
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for
warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button
towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings. Push the button on the faceplate for
cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button
towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the
driver’s temperature will move down with the passenger’s temperature, when it is decreased.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect System Settings” in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the pres-
ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air
with the blower setting in high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compres-
sor damage when the system is started again.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auto-
matically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 8.4/8.4
NAV system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4 NAV Main Menu
Uconnect 5.0
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
8.4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the
center stack and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
Uconnect 5.0
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 8.4 /8.4 NAV
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
Uconnect 5.0 Media
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have compatible
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation
at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on
the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your ve-
hicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Assist Button
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth, pair
your phone and select the Via Mobile app you want to
play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream your
personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible mobile
device, you will also be able to start your vehicle and
lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
push the VR button
, then say: “YELP search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Dis-
tance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
Yelp
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
SiriusXM Travel Link
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.
Siri Eyes Free Available
Siri Enable Screens
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
NOTE: A push and release of the
button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
then release of the
button will start Siri functions.
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Voice Recognition/Siri Buttons
1 — Phone Pick up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
Siri Eyes Free
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trade-
marks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................344
▫ Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine .........344
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) .344
▫ Extended Park Starting ...................345
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................345
▫ After Starting..........................346
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .346
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............347
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................348
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .348
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission .........348
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................350
䡵 PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .......354
▫ Operation ............................354
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . . .356
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ..........356
▫ Acceleration...........................356
▫ Traction .............................357
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ..............357
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ...................357
▫ Shallow Standing Water ..................357
䡵 POWER STEERING.......................358
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) .............359
▫ Auto Park Brake .......................362
▫ SafeHold .............................362
▫ Brake Service Mode .....................363
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................364
䡵 ELECTRONIC
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .....364
5
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)......364
▫ Brake System Warning Light ...............364
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............365
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light .............366
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ................366
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...................367
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .............369
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...........369
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ............372
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB) ................373
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS) .................373
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).............373
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ..............374
▫ Tire Markings .........................374
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............376
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ...........378
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ............379
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .........382
▫ Tire Pressure ..........................382
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ..................384
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .....384
▫ Radial Ply Tires ........................385
▫ Tire Types ............................385
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ..............387
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................387
▫ Tire Spinning .........................390
▫ T
read Wear Indicators ...................390
▫ Life Of Tire ...........................391
▫ Replacement Tires ......................391
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .........392
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ......393
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .394
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ............396
▫ General Information .....................399
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................400
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................400
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............400
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........401
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................401
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................402
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................402
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............403
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED ............403
▫ E-85 General Information .................403
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................403
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................404
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..............404
▫ Starting .............................405
▫ Cruising Range ........................405
▫ Replacement Parts ......................405
▫ Maintenance ..........................405
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................406
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............408
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................409
▫ Certification Label ......................409
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................410
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................411
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .411
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models ..............................411
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models ..............................412
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10
seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run, and will automati-
cally disengage itself when the engine is running. If the
engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automati-
cally in 10 seconds. If this occurs, cycle the ignition switch
to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait
five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Extended
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Park Starting⬙ procedures; it may be flooded. To clear any
excess fuel;
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it
2. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release it as
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds.
3. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal.
4. Cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver’s
side headlamp.
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5
Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
WARNING! (Continued)
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the trans-
mission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission
in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed above the gear
selector. To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear
selector. Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it,
to access the L or S position. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section). To
shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to
DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the custom-
er’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans-
mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
Premium Gear Selector with Shift Paddles
The premium transmission gear selector (with manual shift
paddles mounted on the steering wheel) provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the shift paddles (refer to
⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section). Pressing the shift
paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
Transmission Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leav-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the
shift paddles (if equipped, refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in
this section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans-
mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-
pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warn-
ing message will appear in the instrument cluster, and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). Normal opera-
tion will resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift sched-
ule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to
make full use of available engine power. To access SPORT
mode, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully
clockwise.
LOW (L) — If Equipped
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift
for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clock-
wise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2
to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This sys-
tem can also provide you with more control during pass-
ing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it will
operate automatically, shifting between the nine available
gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap one of the
steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will activate
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
a temporary Paddle Shift mode. The transmission will
revert back to normal operation after a period of time,
depending on accelerator pedal activity. When the trans-
mission gear selector is in the SPORT position, tapping
either shift paddle will activate ⬙permanent⬙ Paddle Shift
mode. The transmission will remain in Paddle Shift mode
until the driver deliberately disables Paddle Shift (as
described below). Tapping (-) to enter Paddle Shift mode
will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear,
while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift mode will retain the
current gear. When Paddle Shift is active, the current
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless
an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It
will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator pedal
activity will cause the transmission to revert to auto-
matic operation.
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even when
maximum engine speed is reached (except the transmis-
sion will upshift automatically from 1st to 2nd gear at
wide open throttle, if necessary). Otherwise, the trans-
mission will upshift only when commanded by the
driver.
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current
gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
accelerates.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle Shift
mode at any time without taking your foot off the accel-
erator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving con-
ditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted auto-
matically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel
traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear
wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
(Continued)
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR ⬙POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM” mes-
sage and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
Instrument Cluster Display screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more conve-
nient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle
from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect Settings.
The park brake switch is located in the center console.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once
the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp
in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch
will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch if OFF, however, it can only
be released when the ignition switch in the RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in the applied
position or 90 seconds in the released position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake
will automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK. Once the park brake is engaged, the
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engag-
ing.
The park brake will release automatically when the igni-
tion is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is in
DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away by pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the RUN position. Press on the brake pedal,
then push the park brake switch down momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal.
Electric Park Brake Switch
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The park
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not
in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated auto-
matically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete
stop using the park brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake will
remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flash-
ing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park brake
system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to hold
the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by holding the EPB switch in the release position while the
transmission is being placed into PARK. This bypass can be
reset by cycling the ignition off and back on again, or by
driving the vehicle up to at least 12 mph (20 km/h), or by
going to the personal setting menu and turning the Auto
Park Brake function OFF and then back ON again.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is
not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is
open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt
to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the park
brake will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle
from rolling.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
Electric Park Brake Switch to the release position while the
driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold
will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position and
back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake ser-
vice.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering the Brake Service Mode through instrument
cluster display or the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle.
This menu based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform
rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), and Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
WARNING! (Continued)
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
(Continued)
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Instrument Cluster Dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink sev-
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the “ESC off” but-
ton to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici-
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac-
tion is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain ve-
hicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that
the feature is active is the torque applied to the steering
wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted
speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs,
vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Load-
ing” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this
manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
mation.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
(Continued)
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equip-
ment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found
in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for
more information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• For a 215/55R17 tire on a 17 x 7.0J x 41mm wheel, use of
a snow traction device with a maximum projection of
9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to turn off.
Tire Rotation
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the message graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update, the pressure
values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
return to their original color, and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
⬙SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
longer flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYS-
TEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure value
will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to
XX⬙ message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SER-
VICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message for five sec-
onds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound,
the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the instruments
cluster will display a “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYS-
TEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your ve-
hicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide opti-
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted oc-
tane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
(Continued)
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please ob-
serve pump labels as they should clearly communicate if
a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and many void
or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
WARNING! (Continued)
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may
be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine to
start under cold conditions, may affect drivability, and
could cause engine damage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost
or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap has
been designed for use with this vehicle.
1. Place the vehicle in PARK (P) position and switch the
ignition LOCK/OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
release to open.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap (gas cap) and hang by tether
hook on fuel filler door.
Push To Open
Fuel Filler Door
1— Tether Hook
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door around the entire perimeter to break the ice buildup
and re-open the door.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
6. Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge of
the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel door will
close.
Fuel Filler Door And Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1— Tether Hook
Push To Close
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the malfunction indicator light to
turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap
can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Instrument Cluster Display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel
filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diag-
nostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, refer to “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in
“What To Do In Emergencies”.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing for front-wheel drive models is al-
lowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the engine OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Remove the key fob.
12. Release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............414
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............414
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .415
▫ Torque Specifications ....................415
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........416
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................417
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation. . . .418
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........419
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ..........420
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........425
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...........425
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................426
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................427
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................433
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ............435
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ...............436
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ..................437
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............438
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................439
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............442
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ..........444
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ............444
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ........................445
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............445
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch
bank below the radio screen.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under an access cover in the
trunk.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the Tire Service Kit.
Pull Strap
Tire Service Kit Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
4. Remove Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and turn Off the igni-
tion.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to
Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under an
access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the
jack, wheel chocks and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Pull Strap
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
4. Remove the scissors jack, wheel bolt wrench and wheel
chocks from the spare wheel as an assembly. Remove the
chocks from the jack assembly. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove the
wrench from the jack assembly.
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shifter into the park position.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench and wheel chocks
from the spare wheel as an assembly. Remove the chocks
from the jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with
two attachment points. When the jack is partially ex-
panded, the tension between the two attachment points
holds the jack handle in place.
Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations
428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-
ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
3. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry
the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
4. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
5. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
Front Body Flange
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429
Rear Body Flange Front Body Flange Engaged
430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the
jack saddle between the locating notches on the sill
flange.
7. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and
install the spare tire.
Rear Body Flange Engaged
Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
8. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
9. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
Mounting Spare Tire
432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
10. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
12. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
13. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Securely stow the
jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Release the parking
brake before driving the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping
the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks.
Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided. Release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Bolt
434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks.
Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided. Release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-
starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
(Continued)
438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will al-
low your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is underneath
the rubber storage bin liner in the center console pass-
through.
3. Unsnap the tether from the Manual Park Release lever,
and use it to pull the lever upwards.
Manual Park Release location
Manual Park Release Cover
440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Pull the tether to rotate the lever up and rearward, until
it locks vertically in place. Verify that the Manual Park
Release lever is locked in the released position.
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To reset the Manual Park Release:
1. Pull the tether upwards to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down to its original position.
3. Re-install the access cover and the rubber storage bin
liner.
Manual Park Release Tether Locked Position
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points that
can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on the
underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of
the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the ignition
is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is
released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable the Elec-
tric Park Brake each time the driver’s door is opened, by
pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
Front Of Vehicle Recovery Points
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
(Continued)
444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags” in “Occupant Restraints” in the Owner’s Manual
on the DVD for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags” in “Occupant Restraints” in the Owner’s Manual
on the DVD for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ...........449
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ...........450
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .451
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................451
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............452
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................452
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ...................453
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................453
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .............454
▫ Engine Oil ...........................454
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................457
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................457
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................458
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............458
▫ Body Lubrication ......................462
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................462
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................462
▫ Exhaust System ........................463
▫ Cooling System ........................464
▫ Brake System .........................469
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................470
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion ........................472
䡵 FUSES ................................476
▫ Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ...........477
▫ Interior Fuses .........................487
䡵 VEHICLE
STORAGE .....................488
7
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ...................488
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................490
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps ......490
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamp ..................492
▫ Front Side Marker Lamps ................494
▫ Front Fog Lamp .......................495
▫ Backup Lamps (Passenger Side).............496
▫ Backup Lamps (Driver Side) ...............497
▫ Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp...............498
▫ License Plate Lamp .....................499
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................500
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ...............................501
▫ Engine ..............................501
▫ Chassis .............................503
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect Cy-
berSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap
is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing proce-
dure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum In-
stitute (API). The manufacturer only rec-
ommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer using recovery and recy-
cling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
The cabin air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover, by
inserting fingers between bottom of side panel (at rear)
and the carpet. Pull outboard to disengage the 3 clips.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
3. Carefully remove 3 push pins holding the hush panel
and remove the part.
Console Closeout Panel
Hush Panel
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
top bottom of the door and lift the tab at the top of the
door to release the cover then rotate remove the door
out and lift up.
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position flow
direction indicators.
6. Install the new cabin air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Air Filter Cover Location
Cabin Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
(Continued)
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumula-
tion of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not
running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper
vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine
coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap
is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will
begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT
REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact your local autho-
rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cool-
ing system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
WARNING! (Continued)
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
diately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission
has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid
level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid
level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or
metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These prod-
ucts may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid
automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle
(both passenger and cargo area).
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, sun-
tan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or
decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent
damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
(Continued)
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on
the inside of the cover.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – – Not Used
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F08 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Control Module (ECM)/
Fuel Inj.
F09 – – Not Used
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If
Equipped
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
F13 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/
VSM (Engine Stop/Start Only)
F14 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module
(DTCM)/Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) – If Equipped/RDM/
Brake System Module (BSM)/
Brake Pedal Switch/EPB (Electric
Park Brake)
F15 – – Not Used
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coil
F17 – – Not Used
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F18 – – Not Used
F19 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
F22 – 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan Enable
F23 – 70 Amp Tan Body Controller Module (BCM) –
Feed 2
F23 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM)
#2 – If Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
F24 – – Not Used
F25B – 20 Amp Yellow Front Washer Pump – If
Equipped with Engine Stop/Start
Option
F26 – – Not Used
F27 – – Not Used
F28 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
(TCM)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F29 – – Not Used
F30 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/
EPS/Fuel Pump Relay Feed
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan PWM Controller
F38 – – Not Used
F39 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM)
#1 – If Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
F41 60 Amp Yellow – Body Controller Module (BCM) –
Feed 1
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F42 – – Not Used
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 – – Not Used
F45 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module (PDM) –
If Equipped
F46 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof – If Equipped
F47 – – Not Used
F48 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module (DDM)
F49 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter (115V A/C) – If
Equipped
F50 30 Amp Pink – Windshield Wiper Smart Motor
(WWSM)
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – – Not Used
F53 30 Amp Pink – Brake System Module BSM &
Valves
F54 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller Module (BCM) –
Feed 3
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F55 – 10 Amp Red Blind Spot Sensors/Compass/
Rearview Camera – If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module
(IGNM)/RF Hub
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module/
Voltage Stability Module (VSM)
#2 – If Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
F59 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control Module
(DTCM)
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet – Center Console
F61 – – Not Used
F62 – – Not Used
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F64 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Steering Wheel – If
Equipped
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F65 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/
Humidity Sensor/Driver Assist
System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped With
Engine Stop/Start Option
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/
(Electronic Climate Control
(ECC)) HVAC
F67 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/
Humidity Sensor/Drivers Assist
System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – 10 Amp Red Gear Shift Module (GSM)/Active
Grill Shutter (AGS). – If
Equipped/EPB SW
F70 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) –
If Equipped with Engine Stop/
Start Option
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Right – If
Equipped with Engine Stop/Start
Option
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
F73 – – Not Used
F74 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster/Defogger
F75 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F76 – 10 Amp Red Drivers Window SW– If
Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port/Brake Pedal Switch
F78 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port/Steering Column
Control Module (SCCM)
F79 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/
Switch Bank/Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC)/EPB SW
F80 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F84 30 Amp Pink – Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
F85 – – Not Used
F86 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns – If Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
F87A – 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Left – If
Equipped Engine Stop/Start Op-
tion
F88 – 10 Amp Red Collision Mitigation Module
(CMM)/Electrochromatic Mirror/
Haptic Lane Feedback Module
(Half)/Humidity Sensor– If
Equipped
F89 – – Not Used
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – – Not Used
F92 – – Not Used
F93 40 Amp Green – Brake System Module (BSM) –
Pump Motor – If Equipped
F94 30 Amp Pink – Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F95 – 10 Amp Red Electrochromatic Mirror/Rain/
Pass. Window SW/Power Outlet
Console Illumination/Sensor/
Sunroof – If Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compart-
ment on the left side dash panel under the instrument
panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module / Siren
F37 7.5 Amp Brown Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
F38 20 Amp Yellow All Doors Lock/Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
F91 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Visor Vanity Lamp A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp A6220
Shift Indicator Lamp IKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp HID Bulb – D3S HID Bulb
Bi-Halogen Headlamp 9005HL+
Daytime Running Lamp HID HDLP– LED
Hal HDLP– Reduced Voltage LB 9005HL+
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24W SV
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp Hal HDLP – PWY24W SV (common with turn)
Base Hal HDLP – LED in light pipe
HID HDLP – LED in light guide (common with DRL)
Front Fog Lamp H11
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21W
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp 921
License Lamp W5W
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source your-
self. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocu-
tion if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Remove the top pushpin on the headlamp access door in
the wheel liner to access the headlamp assembly.
Access Door
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
Headlamp Bulb Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-
lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Lock headlamp access door in wheel liner.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the lamp assembly on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the beauty cover, by removing all push pins
and lifting beauty cover.
Headlamp Bulb
Beauty Cover
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the brace by removing the four fasteners and
loosening the 5th inboard fastener.
4. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly coun-
terclockwise, and then remove the front turn signal
lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
6. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp socket
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
8. Install brace, brace bolts and tighten as shown.
9. Install beauty cover.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
Brace Bolt Tightening Sequence
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the three fasteners from the lower closeout, and
peel down the lower closeout.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise, and
remove the bulb and socket assembly from the front fog
lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
clockwise to lock it in place.
Lower Closeout
Front Fog Lamp Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
6. Position the lower closeout panel in place and secure
with the three fasteners.
Backup Lamps (Passenger Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the passenger side access cover.
3. Remove the inner trunk lid handle cover.
4. Remove the two screws and remove the inner trunk lid
handle.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
5. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
6. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
lid lamp housing.
Inner Deck Panel
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Lamp Socket
7. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the replace-
ment bulb.
8. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
9. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock it
into place.
10. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a push
pin if removed.
11. Install access cover.
Backup Lamps (Driver Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the drivers side access cover.
3. Remove inner deck lid support push pin.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
4. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
NOTE: Passenger side is shown. The driver’s side is
similar.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
Backup Lamp Socket
5. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
lid lamp housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the replace-
ment bulb.
7. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
8. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock it
into place.
9. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a push
pin if removed.
10. Install the access cover.
Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the tail lamp housing beauty cover by grasping
the top edge and pulling rearward to expose the tail
lamp housing bolts.
3. Remove the tail lamp housing bolts.
Tail Lamp Beauty Cover
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull the tail lamp housing directly rearward to dislodge
the two out bored ball studs from the socket fasteners.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use significant force to
remove the two out bored ball studs from the socket
fasteners to remove the tail lamp housing.
5. Rotate the stop/rear turn signal lamp socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the replace-
ment bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the tail lamp housing and
rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
8. Install the tail lamp housing.
9. Install the tail lamp housing beauty cover.
License Plate Lamp
1. Remove the screw of the license plate lamp assembly
and pull down on the license plate lamp assembly to
remove.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the replace-
ment bulb.
3. Install the license plate lamp assembly.
Tail Lamp Bolts
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.6L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20,
API Certified)
5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified)
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
8.7 Quarts 8.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If Equipped 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If Equipped 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cool-
ing system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
in “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 507
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pul-
ley, and replace if necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 509
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................512
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............512
▫ Prepare A List .........................512
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............512
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................512
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............513
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........513
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................513
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........513
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................514
▫ Service Contract .......................514
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............515
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................515
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............515
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .515
▫ In Canada ............................516
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............516
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................517
▫ Treadwear ............................517
▫ Traction Grades ........................517
▫ Temperature Grades .....................518
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD,
for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should imme-
diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 515
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manu-
als (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
516 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in
each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your
vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 517
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-
cessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
518 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .........................364
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .139
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............466
Additives, Fuel ............................402
Adjust
Down .................................109
Forward ...............................108
Rearward ..............................108
Up...................................109
AirBag..................................48
Air Bag Operation .........................50
Air Bag Warning Light ...................51, 64
Driver Knee Air Bag .......................58
Enhanced Accident Response ..............63, 445
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................445
FrontAirBag ............................51
If A Deployment Occurs ....................62
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................57
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............65
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............65
Side Air Bags ............................58
Transporting Pets .........................81
Air Bag Light ........................64, 83, 248
Air Bag Maintenance .........................65
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......457
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................458
Air Conditioning Filter ...................320, 459
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............319, 321
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............458, 459
Air Conditioning System ..................318, 458
Air Filter ................................457
Air Pressure, Tires ..........................384
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................14
Disarm The System ........................15
Rearming The System ......................14
Tamper Alert ............................16
Vehicle Security Alarm .....................14
Alarm, Panic...............................19
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................250
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ......................356
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................6
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................466, 500
Disposal ...............................468
Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) .................365
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................262
Appearance Care...........................472
Assist, Hill Start ...........................367
Auto Down Power Windows ...................33
Automatic Door Locks........................26
520 INDEX
Automatic Headlights .......................123
Automatic High Beams ......................124
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........318
Automatic Transaxle ........................347
Automatic Transmission ..................348, 472
Adding Fluid ........................472, 503
Fluid And Filter Changes ...................472
Fluid Change ...........................472
Fluid Level Check .....................470, 471
Fluid Type ..........................470, 503
Special Additives .........................471
Autostick ................................354
Auto Unlock, Doors .........................26
Auto Up Power Windows .....................33
Axle Lubrication ...........................503
Battery...............................251, 458
Charging System Light ....................251
Key Fob Battery Replacement .................19
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................19
Remote Battery Replacement .................19
Belts, Seat.................................83
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................462
B-Pillar Location ...........................379
Brake Assist System.........................366
Brake Control System, Electronic................364
Brake Fluid ...............................503
Brake System ..........................364, 469
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................364
Fluid Check .........................469, 503
Master Cylinder .........................469
Warning Light ...........................249
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................348
Brightness, Interior Lights ....................129
Bulb Replacement....................488, 490, 494
Bulbs, Light.........................85, 488, 494
Camera, Rear .............................208
Capacities,
Fluid ...........................500
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................406
Oil (Engine) ......................449, 450, 456
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................467
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................82, 403
Cargo Area Features ........................236
Cargo Compartment ........................236
Car Washes...............................472
Certification Label ..........................409
Chains, Tire ..............................392
Changing A Flat Tire ........................425
10
INDEX 521
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................375
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .452
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................82
Checks, Safety .............................82
Child Restraint .............................66
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................70
Child Restraints ..........................66
Child Seat Installation ...................77, 78
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .........76
Infants And Child Restraints .................68
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt ...................................77
LATCH Positions .........................72
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ..............74
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ........72
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........69
Seating Positions ..........................71
Child Safety Locks ..........................26
Clean Air Gasoline .........................400
Cleaning
Wheels ................................473
Climate Control............................306
Coin Holder ..............................232
Cold Weather Operation......................344
Compact Spare Tire .........................387
Console, Floor .............................232
Console, Overhead .........................210
Contract, Service ...........................514
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............467
Cooling System ............................464
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................466
Coolant Capacity .........................500
Coolant Level ...........................468
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................468
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................465
Inspection ..........................465, 468
Points To Remember ......................468
Pressure Cap ............................467
Radiator Cap ...........................467
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......466, 500, 501
Corrosion Protection ........................472
Cr
uise Control (Speed Control) .................139
Cruise Light........................267, 268, 269
Cupholders...............................230
Customer Assistance ........................512
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ..............130
Daytime Running Lights .....................125
Dealer Service .............................453
522 INDEX
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ...................35
Deck Lid, Power Release ......................34
Defroster, Rear Window ......................240
Defroster, Windshield ........................83
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................451
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ....................127
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................454
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................442
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................468
Do Not Disturb ............................339
Door Ajar ................................255
Door Ajar Light............................255
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .......26
Door Locks ...........................18, 23
KeyFob .............................23, 25
Key Fob Emergency Key ..................19, 26
Manual Door Locks ........................23
Power Door Locks ........................25
Remote ................................23
Remote Keyless Entry ....................23, 25
Door Locks, Automatic .......................26
Door Opener, Garage ........................213
Driver Information Display (DID)
Messages ..............................274
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .......................111
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................357
E-85 Fuel ................................403
Electrical Power Outlets ......................227
Electric Parking Brake .......................359
Electric Rear Window Defrost ..................240
Electric Remote Mirrors ......................100
Electronic Brake Control System ................364
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................365
Traction Control System ....................369
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......136, 139
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............369
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........252
Electr
onic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .......208
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .....271
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Menu .................................271
EVIC Display ...........................271
Emergency Deck Lid Release ...................35
10
INDEX 523
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................414
Jacking ................................425
Jump Starting ...........................435
Overheating ............................414
Towing ................................442
Emergency Trunk Release .....................35
Emission Control System Maintenance............452
Engine ...............................449, 450
Air Cleaner .............................457
Block Heater ............................346
Break-In Recommendations ..................81
Checking Oil Level .......................454
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................501
Cooling ...............................464
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................82, 403
Fails To Start ............................345
Flooded, Starting .........................345
Fuel Requirements ........................400
Jump Starting ...........................435
Oil ............................454, 500, 501
Oil Filler Cap .....................449, 450, 456
Oil Filter ...............................457
Oil Selection .........................455, 500
Oil Synthetic ............................456
Overheating ............................414
Starting ...............................344
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................456
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................456
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........63, 445
Entry System, Illuminated .....................16
Ethanol ..............................400, 403
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................82, 403
Exhaust System .........................82, 463
Exterior Lighting........................122, 494
Exterior Lights ..........................85, 494
Filters
Air
Cleaner .............................457
Air Conditioning .....................320, 459
Engine Oil ..........................457, 501
Engine Oil Disposal .......................457
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................414
Turn Signal ....................85, 126, 267, 492
Flash-To-Pass .............................127
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ..........................405
Engine Oil .............................404
Fuel Requirements ....................403, 404
524 INDEX
Maintenance ............................405
Replacement Parts ........................405
Starting ...............................405
Flooded Engine Starting ......................345
Floor Console .............................232
Fluid, Brake ..............................503
Fluid Capacities............................500
Fluid Leaks ...............................85
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................469
Engine Oil .............................454
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ............501
Fog Lights ............................125, 495
Fog Light Service...........................495
Folding Rear Seat ..........................116
Forward Collision Warning....................159
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................438
Front Position Light .........................494
Fuel ....................................400
Additives ..............................402
Clean Air ..............................400
Ethanol ............................400, 403
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................406
Gasoline ...............................400
Light .................................261
Materials Added .........................402
Methanol ..............................400
Octane Rating ........................400, 501
Requirements ...........................400
Specifications ...........................501
Tank Capacity ...........................500
Fuel, Flexible..............................403
Fuses ...................................476
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)............213, 218
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .....................406
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................400
Gasoline,
Reformulated ......................400
Gear Ranges ..............................350
Glass Cleaning ............................475
GVWR ..................................409
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water .................357
Hazard Warning Flasher......................414
Headlights
Automatic .............................123
Bulb Replacement ........................490
Cleaning ...............................475
10
INDEX 525
Delay .................................123
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........127
Lights On Reminder ......................125
On With Wipers .........................123
Passing ................................127
Replacing ..............................490
Switch ................................122
Time Delay .............................123
Head Restraints ............................114
Head Rests ...............................114
Heated Mirrors ............................100
Heater, Engine Block ........................346
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .....127
Hill Start Assist ............................367
Holder, Coin ..............................232
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............213
Ignition
Key....................................9
Illuminated Entry ...........................16
Courtesy Lights ..........................16
Front Courtesy Overhead Console .............16
Illuminated Entry .........................16
Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob ................16
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................93
Instrument Cluster ............244, 251, 254, 263, 267
Instrument Cluster .......................273
Instrument Panel And Controls.................243
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................476
Interior Appearance Care .....................474
Interior Fuses .............................487
Interior Lights .............................128
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..............131
Introduction ................................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) .......................229
Jacking Instructions .........................427
Jack Location .............................425
Jack Operation .........................425, 427
Jump Starting .............................435
Key Fob
Emer
gency Key ...........................10
Lock The Doors ..........................18
Panic Alarm .............................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........14, 19
Remote Battery Replacement .................19
Remote Keyless Entry ....................10, 17
Unlatch The Trunk ........................18
Unlock The Doors .........................17
526 INDEX
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....19
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......19
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry .................17
Key-In Reminder............................11
Keyless Enter-N-Go..........................28
Enter The Trunk ........................18, 28
KeyFob................................28
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors .................18, 28
Passive Entry ............................28
Passive Entry Programming ..................28
Remote Control ..........................28
Unlock From The Driver’s Side .............17, 28
Unlock From The Passenger Side ............17, 28
Keyless Entry System ........................17
Keyless Go.................................9
Keys .....................................9
Lane Change And Turn Signals.................126
Lane Change Assist .........................127
LaneSense................................163
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........................39
Latches ..................................85
Lead Free Gasoline .........................400
Leaks, Fluid ...............................85
Life Of Tires ..............................391
Light Bulbs .........................85, 488, 494
Light Replacement ......................488, 494
Lights .............................85, 122, 488
AirBag ..........................64, 83, 248
Automatic Headlights .....................123
Battery Saver ...........................130
Brake Assist Warning ......................371
Brake Warning ..........................249
Bulb Replacement .....................490, 494
Cruise ..........................267, 268, 269
Daytime Running ........................125
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..............126, 127
Engine Temperature Warning ................251
Exterior .............................85, 494
Fog ...............................125, 495
Front Replacement ........................494
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................414
Headlights ..........................122,
490
Headlights On Reminder ...................125
Headlights On With Wipers .................123
Headlight Switch .........................122
High Beam .............................127
High Beam/Low Beam Select ................127
Illuminated Entry .........................16
Instrument Cluster .......................122
10
INDEX 527
Intensity Control .........................129
Interior ................................128
License ................................499
Lights On Reminder ......................125
Low Fuel ..............................261
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........256
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ............130
Park ..............................265, 266
Passing ................................127
Reading ............................127, 211
Seat Belt Reminder .......................247
Security Alarm ..........................250
Service ................................490
Side Marker .........................492, 494
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..........259, 394
Traction Control .........................371
Turn Signal ....................85, 126, 267, 492
Vanity Mirror ...........................100
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .251, 267
Loading Vehicle............................409
Tires..................................379
Locks....................................23
Automatic Door ..........................26
Auto Unlock .............................26
Child Protection ..........................26
Door ..................................23
Power Door .............................25
Low Tire Pressure System.....................394
Lubrication, Body ..........................462
Lug Nuts ................................415
Maintenance Free Battery .....................458
Maintenance Procedures......................454
Maintenance Schedule .......................506
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .256, 452
Manual, Service............................516
Marker Lights, Side .........................492
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .....................469
Memory
Feature (Memory Seat) ................117
Memory Seat..............................117
Memory Seats And Radio.....................117
Methanol ................................400
Mirrors ..................................93
Electric Powered .........................100
Electric Remote ..........................100
Exterior Folding ..........................99
Heated ................................100
Outside ................................98
Rearview ...............................93
Vanity ................................100
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................6
528 INDEX
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................394
MOPAR Parts ..........................453, 515
MTBE/ETBE ..............................400
Multi-Function Control Lever ..................126
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...................81
Occupant Restraints .........................36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............400, 501
Oil, Engine............................454, 501
Capacity ...............................500
Change Interval .........................455
Checking ..............................454
Dipstick ...............................454
Disposal ...............................457
Filter ..............................457, 501
Filter Disposal ...........................457
Identification Logo .......................455
Materials Added To .......................457
Pressure Warning Light ....................252
Recommendation .....................455, 500
Synthetic ..............................456
Viscosity ...........................456, 500
Oil Filter, Change ..........................457
Oil Filter, Selection..........................457
Oil Pressure Light ..........................252
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................451
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink)...............213
Operating Precautions .......................451
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................98
Overhead Console ..........................210
Overheating, Engine ........................414
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........4,516
Paint Care................................472
Panic Alarm ...............................19
Parking Brake .............................359
ParkSense System, Rear ...................168, 175
Passing
Light .............................127
Personalized Menu Bar ......................322
Pets .....................................81
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........380
Power
Brakes ................................364
Deck Lid Release .........................34
Door Locks ..............................25
Mirrors ................................100
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .........227, 229
Sunroof ............................220, 223
10
INDEX 529
Windows ...............................32
Power Seats
Down .................................109
Forward ...............................108
Rearward ..............................108
Up...................................109
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................44
Preparation For Jacking ......................426
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............................45
Radial Ply Tires ............................385
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............467
Radio Frequency
General Information .............12, 14, 21, 23, 31
Radio Operation ...........................305
Radio Remote Controls ......................304
Radio (Sound Systems) ......................303
Rain Sensitive Wiper System...................133
Rear Camera ..............................208
Rear Cupholder............................230
Rear ParkSense System ...................168, 175
Rear Seat, Folding ..........................116
Rear Window Defroster ......................240
Rear Window Features .......................240
Recreational Towing.........................411
Reformulated Gasoline.......................400
Refrigerant ...............................459
Reminder, Lights On ........................125
Reminder, Seat Belt ..........................38
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................21
Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob Battery Replacement .................19
Lock The Doors ..........................18
Panic Alarm .............................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........14, 19
Remote Battery Replacement .................19
Remote Keyless Entry ....................10, 17
Unlatch The Trunk ........................18
Unlock The Doors .........................17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........304
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode ....................22
EVIC
Remote Start Abort Message .............22
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................23
How To Use Remote Start ...................21
Remote Starting System .....................21
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . .23
Remote Starting System .......................21
530 INDEX
Remote Trunk Release ........................34
Replacement Bulbs .........................488
Replacement Parts ..........................453
Replacement Tires ..........................391
Reporting Safety Defects .....................515
Restraint, Head ............................114
Restraints, Child ............................66
Rotation, Tires.............................393
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................83
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................85
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................515
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..........................82
Safety Information, Tire ......................374
Safety Tips ................................82
Schedule, Maintenance.......................506
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .......43
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............45
Energy Management Feature .................45
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................41
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................43
Pregnant Women .........................44
Seat Belt Extender .........................44
Seat Belt Pretensioner ......................45
Seat Belt Reminder ........................38
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................476
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................38
Seat Belts ..............................37, 83
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ....................43
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..........43
Child Restraint ...........................66
Extender ...............................44
Front Seat .........................37, 39, 41
Inspection ..............................83
Operating Instructions ......................41
Pregnant Women .........................44
Pretensioners ............................45
Rear Seat ...............................39
Reminder ..............................247
Untwisting Procedure ......................43
Seats ................................108, 112
Adjustment .........................108, 110
Easy Entry .............................120
Head
Restraints ..........................114
Heated ................................112
Memory ...............................117
Rear Folding ............................116
Seatback Release .........................111
10
INDEX 531
Tilting .................................111
Vented ................................113
Ventilated ..............................113
Security Alarm ............................250
Arm The System ..........................14
Disarm The System ........................15
Rearming The System ......................14
Security Alarm ...........................14
Tamper Alert ............................16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............501
SENTRY KEY
Immobilizer .............................12
Key Programming .........................14
Replacement Keys .........................13
Service Assistance ..........................512
Service Contract ...........................514
Service Manuals ...........................516
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ....................348
Shoulder Belts .............................39
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................98
Signals, Turn.....................85, 126, 267, 492
Siri .................................336, 337
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................392
Snow Tires ...............................386
Spare Tire .........................387, 389, 425
Spark Plugs ..............................501
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................501
Oil...................................501
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .........................137, 138
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...................145
Cancel ................................137
Speed Control (Cruise Control)..............136, 139
Starting ...............................21, 344
Cold Weather ...........................344
Engine Fails To Start ......................345
Remote ................................21
Starting And Operating ......................344
Starting Procedures .........................344
Steering
Column Controls .........................126
Column
Lock ...........................134
Tilt Column ............................134
Wheel, Heated ..........................135
Wheel, Tilt .............................134
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................304
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .304
Storage ..................................488
532 INDEX
Storage, Vehicle ........................319, 488
Storing Your Vehicle ........................488
Stuck, Freeing .............................438
Sunglasses Storage..........................212
Sun Roof .............................220, 223
Sun Visor Extension.........................101
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag...........48
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................456
System, Remote Starting ......................21
Telescoping Steering Column ..................134
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...........318
Tilt Steering Column ........................134
Time Delay, Headlight .......................123
Tip Start .................................344
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........379, 380
Tire Markings .............................374
Tires...........................85, 382, 387, 517
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................391
Air Pressure ............................382
Chains ................................392
Changing ..............................425
Compact Spare ..........................387
General Information ...................382, 387
High Speed .............................384
Inflation Pressures ........................384
Jacking ............................425, 427
Life Of Tires ............................391
Load Capacity .......................379, 380
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ..........276, 394
Pressure Warning Light ....................259
Quality Grading .........................517
Radial ................................385
Replacement ............................391
Rotation ...............................393
Safety .............................374, 382
Sizes .................................375
Snow
Tires .............................386
Spare Tire .......................387, 389, 425
Spinning ...............................390
Tread Wear Indicators .....................390
Tire Safety Information.......................374
Tire Service Kit .........................416, 419
To Open Hood ............................120
Towing ..................................410
Disabled Vehicle .........................442
Recreational ............................411
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............411
Traction ..............................356, 357
Traction Control ...........................369
10
INDEX 533
Trailer Towing.............................410
Transaxle ................................347
Automatic .............................347
Autostick ..............................354
Operation ..............................347
Transmission ..............................348
Automatic ..........................348, 470
Maintenance ............................470
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ......213
Transporting Pets ...........................81
Tread Wear Indicators .......................390
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ......................34, 35
Trunk Release, Emergency .....................35
Trunk Release Remote Control ..................34
Turn Signals........................126, 267, 492
Uconnect
Operation ..............................303
Uconnect Settings .........................18
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV .......................339
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .......................332
Uconnect Settings.........................18, 26
Uconnect Voice Command ....................322
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................517
Universal Transmitter........................213
Unleaded Gasoline .........................400
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................43
Vanity Mirrors.............................100
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............6
Vehicle Loading ........................380, 409
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Storage .........................319, 488
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................456
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................322
Warning Flasher, Hazard .....................414
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................515
Washers, Windshield .....................130, 462
W
ashing Vehicle ...........................472
Water
Driving Through .........................357
Wheel And Wheel Trim ......................473
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................473
Wind Buffeting ......................34, 222, 226
Window Fogging...........................320
Windows .................................32
Auto Down .............................33
534 INDEX
Driver/Passenger Window Controls ............32
Express Up And Down .....................33
Power .................................32
Power Windows ..........................32
Rear Passenger Window Controls ..............32
Reset Auto-Up ...........................33
Wind Buffeting ...........................34
Window Controls .........................32
Window Lockout .........................34
Windshield Defroster.........................83
Windshield Washers .....................130, 462
Fluid .................................462
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................462
Windshield Wipers .........................130
Wiper Blade Replacement.....................462
Wipers, Intermittent.........................131
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .......................133
Wrecker Towing ...........................442
10
INDEX 535
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
17UF-126-AA
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
